高中英语必修五课文电子版
人教版高中英语必修5课文原文
---------------------------------------------------------------最新资料推荐------------------------------------------------------人教版高中英语必修5课文原文. 必修 5 Uni t 1 JOHH SHOW DEFEATS KING CHOLERA John Snow was a famous doctor in London - so expert, indeed,that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. Buthe became inspired when he thought about helping ordinarypeople exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of itsday. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So manythousands of terrified people died every time there was anoutbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solvethis problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlleduntil its cause was found. He became interested intwo theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people.The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air. Acloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims.The second suggested that people absorbed this disease intotheir bodies with their meals. From the stomach the diseasequickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died. John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but heneeded evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854,he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spreadquickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather1/ 2information. In two . particular streets, the choleraoutbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in tendays. He was determined to find out why. First hemarked on a map the exact places where all the dead people hadlived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of thedisease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in BroadStreet (especially numbers 16, 37, 38 and 40) . He alsonoticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had notforeseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 CambridgeStreet. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk thewater from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame. Next, ...。
人教版 英语 必修五 课文 电子版
U n i t1G R E A T S C I E N T I S T S JOHN SNOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London — so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air, a cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. From the stomach the disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people have lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 163738 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame,Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to polluted water any more. Finally “King Cholera” was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONAY THEORYNicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun there did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went around it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only new theory could do that. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going around the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went around the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his theory, saying it was against God’s idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus’ theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built. His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King James of Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they will have very different institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal system as well as different football terms for competitions like the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to go to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national government and its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There have been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. This solid stone, square tower had remained standing for one thousand years. Although the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of Buckingham Palace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in Highgate Cemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the British Museum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for Windsor Castle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 LIFE IN THE FUTUREFIRST IMPRESSIONSSpacemail:liqiang15/11/3008(earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up the prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from“time flag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get fromflying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first, however, my friend and guide, Wangping, was very understanding and gave some green tablets which helped a lot. Well- know for their expertise, his parents’ company, called “Future Tours”, tr ansported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived.I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I findAt first my surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gas had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wangping appeared. “Put on this mask,” he advised. “it’ll make you feel much better.” He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wangping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wangping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was swept up into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a “time lag” flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wangping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved- it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much-needed oxygen. Then Wangping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. “Why not sit down and eat a little” he said. “You may found this difficult as it is your first time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you’ll be ready for some visits.” Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modern in space. Described as an enormous round plate, it spins slowly in space to imitate the pull of the earth’s gravity. Insidewas an exhibition f the most up-to-date inventions of the 31st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we’re going to examine one of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more post age or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a “thoughtpad”. You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it’s sent. It’s stored on the “thoughtpad” of the receiver. It’s quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly, an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can weDuring the explanation I looked at t he pair of small objects called “thoughtpads” on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the “environment area”. People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I right ( We nodded.) Well, now there’s a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as “fertilizer” for the fields and “soil” for deserts. Nothing is wasted, and everything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn’t itI stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space station like this one. A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they’re transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 MAKING THE NEWSMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT“Unforgettable”, says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang( ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin( HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We’re delighted you’re coming to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questionsZY: Can I get out on a story immediatelyHX:(laughing) That’s admirable, but I’m afraid it would be unusual! Wait till you’re more experienced. First we’ll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful! What do I need to take with me I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You’ll have a professional photographer with you to take photographs. You’ll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you’re int erested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a storyHX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you admire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a good “nose” for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole truth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mindHX: Here comes my list of dos and don’ts: don’ts miss your deadline, don’t be rude, don’t talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so importantHX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notesHX: This is a trick of the trade. If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorder to get the facts straight. It’s also useful if a person wants to challenge you. You have the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stickHX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A football was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the other team win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical. So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bride him. When we saw him together we guessed from the footballer’s body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real “scoop”. I’m looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I’ll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTINH THE “SCOOP”“Quick,” said the editor. “Get that story ready. We need it in this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop.” Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. “Did he really do that” asked someone from the International News Department. “Yes, I’m afraid he did,” Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading, “This will look very good on the page,” she said. “Where is a good picture of this man” Then as the article was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happ y with Zhou Yang’s story. “You are really able to write a good front page article,” she said, Zhou Yang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. “Well done,” he said to Zhou Yang. “But please show me your evidence so we’re sure we’ve got our facts straight.” “I’ll bring it to you immediately,”said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured age for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies tobe ready. “Wait till tonight,” his friend whispered. “I expect there will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!”Unit 5 FIRST AIDFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun’s harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from loosing too much water; it is where you feel cool, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burnt it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of burns.Causes of burnsyou can get burnt by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.●First degree burnsThese affect only the top layer of the skin. These burns are not serious and should feel better within a day or two. Examples include mild sunburn and burns caused by touchinga hot pan, stove or iron for a moment.●Second degree burnsThese affect both the top and the second layer of the skin. These burns are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburn and burns caused by hotliquids.●Three degree burnsThese affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue and organs under the skin.Examples include burns caused by electric shocks, burning clothes, or severe petrol fires.These burns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once.Characteristic of burnsFirst degree burns●dry, red and mildly swollen●mildly painful●turn white when pressedSecond degree burns●rough, red and swollen●blisters●watery surface●extremely painfulThree degree burns●black and white and charred●swollen; often tissue under them can be seen●little or no pain if nerves are damaged; may be pain around edge of injured area.First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degrees burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back in a basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burnt area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rub, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on burns as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If burns are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If burns are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree burns, it is vital to get the victim to the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECERIVES AWARDSeventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John’s quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade’s life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade’s hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived.“I’m proud of what I did but I was just doing what I’d been taught,” John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr. Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, “There is no doubt that John’s quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade’s life. It shows that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference.”Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
人教版 英语 必修五 课文 电子版之欧阳德创编
Unit 1 GREAT SCIENTISTSJOHN SNOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London — so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air, a cloud of dangerous gas floated arounduntil it found its victims. From the stomach the disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people have lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 163738 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He hadnot foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame,Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so muchthat she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to polluted water any more. Finally “King Cholera” was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONAY THEORY Nicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun there did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Churchwould have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went around it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only new theory could do that. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going around the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went around the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his theory, saying it was against God’s idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus’ theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built. His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell toearth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King James of Scotland became King of England and Walesas well. Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack. To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they will have very different institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal system as well as different football terms for competitions like the World Cup! England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called theMidlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to go to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture. The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national government and its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. Therehave been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. This solid stone, square tower had remained standing for one thousand years. Although thebuildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of BuckinghamPalace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends! The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that setsthe world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in HighgateCemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the BritishMuseum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for WindsorCastle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen?" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 LIFE IN THE FUTUREFIRST IMPRESSIONS Spacemail:liqiang299A@GreatAdventureSpaceS 15/11/3008(earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up the prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from“time flag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first, however, my friend and guide, Wangping, was very understanding and gave some green tablets which helped a lot. Well-know for their expertise, his parents’ company, called “Future Tours”, transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived.I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I find?At first my surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gas had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wangping appeared. “Put on this mask,” he advised. “it’ll make you feel muchbetter.” He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wangping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wangping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was swept up into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a “time lag” flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wangping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. Ithad a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved- it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much-needed oxygen. Then Wangping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. “Why not sit down and eat a little?” he said. “You may found this difficult as it is your first time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you’ll be ready for some visits.” Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modern in space. Described as anenormous round plate, it spins slowly in space to imitate the pull of the earth’s gravity. Inside was an exhibition f the most up-to-date inventions of the 31st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we’re going t o examine one of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a “thoughtpad”. You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it’s sent. It’s stored on the “thoughtpad” of the receiver. It’s quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly, an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called “thoughtpads” on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the “environment area”. People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I right? ( We nodded.) Well, now there’s a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as “fertilizer” for the fields and “soil” for deserts. Nothing is wasted, and everything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn’t it?I stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space station like this one. A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they’re transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do? My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 MAKING THE NEWSMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT“Unforgettable ”, says new journali stNever will Zhou Yang( ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin( HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We’re delighted you’re coming to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions? ZY: Can I get out on a story immediately?HX:(laughing) That’s admirable, but I’m afraid it would be unusual! Wait till you’re more experienced. First we’ll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful! What do I need to take with me? I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You’ll have a professional photographer with you to take photographs. You’ll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you’re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story?HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you admire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a g ood “nose” for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole truth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here c omes my list of dos and don’ts: don’ts miss your deadline, don’t be rude, don’t talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says. ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes?HX: This is a trick of the trade. If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorder to get the facts straight. It’s also useful if a person wants to challenge you. You have the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A football was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the other team win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical. So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bride him. When we saw him together we guessed from the footballer’s body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right. ZY: Wow! That was a real “scoop”. I’m looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I’ll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTINH THE “SCOOP”“Quick,” said the editor. “Get that story ready. We need it in this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop.” Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. “Did he really do that?” asked someone from the International News Department. “Yes, I’m afraid he did,” Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the pieceand design the main headline and smaller heading, “This will look very good on the page,” she said. “Where is a good picture of this man?” Then as the artic le was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang’s story. “You are really able to write a good front page article,” she said, Zhou Y ang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. “Well done,” he said to Zhou Yang. “But please show me your evidence so we’re sure we’ve got our facts straight.” “I’ll bring it to you immediately,”said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colourswere going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured age for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. “Wait till tonight,” his friend whispered. “I expect there will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!”Unit 5 FIRST AIDFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun’s harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from loosing too much water; it is where you feel cool, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burnt it can be very serious. Firstaid is a very important first step in the treatment of burns.Causes of burnsyou can get burnt by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals. Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.●First degree burnsThese affect only the top layer of the skin.These burns are not serious and should feelbetter within a day or two. Examples include mild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for a moment.●Second degree burnsThese affect both the top and the secondlayer of the skin. These burns are serious andtake a few weeks to heal. Examples includesevere sunburn and burns caused by hotliquids.●Three degree burnsThese affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue and organs under the skin. Examplesinclude burns caused by electric shocks,burning clothes, or severe petrol fires. Theseburns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once.Characteristic of burnsFirst degree burns●dry, red and mildly swollen●mildly painful●turn white when pressedSecond degree burns●rough, red and swollen●blisters●watery surface●extremely painfulThree degree burns●black and white and charred●swollen; often tissue under them can be seen●little or no pain if nerves are damaged; maybe pain around edge of injured area.First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reducesswelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degrees burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back in a basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burnt area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rub, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on burns as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If burns are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If burns are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree burns, it is vital to get the victim to the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECERIVES AWARD Seventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John’s quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade’s life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade’s hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived.“I’m proud of what I did but I was just doing what I’d been taught,” John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr. Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, “There is no doubt that John’s quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade’s life. It sho ws that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference.”Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
人教版高中英语 必修5 各单元课文原文
Unit 1 Great scientistsJOHH SHOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London - so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air. A cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. The second suggested that people absorbed this disease into their bodies with their meals. From the stomachthe disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people had lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 16, 37, 38 and 40). He alsonoticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame.Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets.He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water panies were instructed not toexpose people to polluted water any more. Finally "King Cholera" was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONRRY THEORYNicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun theredid the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth wasthe centre of the solar system and all planets went round it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only his new theory could do that. So between 1510and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was plete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to theold theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going round the earth. Healso suggested that the earth was spinning as it went round the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it ashe lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his theory, saying it was against God's idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus' theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built.His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century.Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changedto "Great Britain". Happily this was acplished without conflict when King Jamesof Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English governmenttried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwillingand broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to bee the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they still have very differentinstitutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal systems as well as different football teams for petitionslike the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of theindustrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide,these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have togo to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national governmentand its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There has been four sets of invaders ofEngland. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth,the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was builtlong ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. Fancy! This solid stone, square towerhad remained standing for one thousand years.Although the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison bined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of Londonin 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous soundof the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of Buckingham Palace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much totell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very usefulfor navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standingon either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in Highgate Cemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed munism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the British Museum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into anotherbuilding and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, shefelt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for Windsor Castle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen?" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 Life in the futureFIRST IMPRESSIONSSpacemall: liqiang299AGreatAdventureSpaceStation. 15/11/3008 (Earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up this prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I wasunsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from “Time lag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first. However, my friend and guide, Wang Ping, was very understanding and gave me some green tablets which helped a lot. Well-known for their expertise, his parents' pany, called "Future Tours", transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were fortableand after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was pleted and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousandyears in the future. What would I find?At first my new surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its bination of gases had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of freshair, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wang Ping appeared. "Put on this mask," he advised. "It'll make you feelmuch better." He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by puter. These carriages floatabove the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wang Ping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly asfast as him. However, I lost sight of Wang Ping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was sweptup into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a "time lag" flashback and sawthe area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wang Ping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved- it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room withmuch-needed oxygen. Then Wang Ping flashed a switch on a puter screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. "Why not sit down and eat a little?" he said. "You may find this difficult as it is your first time travel trip.Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you'llbe ready for some visits." Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modem in space. Described as an enormous round plate, it spins slowly in space to imitate the pullof the earth's gravity. Inside was an exhibition of the most up-to-date inventionsof the 31 st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we're going to examine oneof the latest forms of munication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or puter! No more postage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a "thoughtpad". You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it's sent. It's stored on the "thoughtpad" of the receiver. It's quick, efficient and environmentallyfriendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly,an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called "thoughtpads" on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the "environment area". People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I fight? (We nodded.) Well, now there's a system where the waste is disposed of usingthe principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, suchas "fertilizer" for the fields and "soil" for deserts. Nothing is wasted, andeverything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn't' it?I stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space stations like this one.A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots producegoods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste,no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the panies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they're transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do? My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 Making the newsMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT"Unforgettable", says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang (ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin (HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Wele. We're delighted you're ing to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions?ZY: Can I go out on a story immediately?HX: (laughing) That' s admirable, but I' m afraid it would be unusual ! Wait till you' re more experienced. First we'll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful. What do I need to take with me? I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You'll have a professional photographer with you to take photographs. You'll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you' re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story?HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you acquire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a good "nose" for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole troth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here es my list of dos and don'ts: don't miss your deadline, don't be rode, don't talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes?HX: This is a trick of the trade, If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorderto get the facts straight. It's also useful if a person wants to challenge you. Youhave the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A footballer was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the otherteam win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical.So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bribe him. When we saw them together we guessed from the footballer's body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real "scoop". I'm looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I'll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTING THE "SCOOP""Quick," said the editor. "Get that story ready. We need it in this editionto be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop." Zhou Yang had just e back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. "Did he really do that?"asked someone from the International News Department. "Yes, I' m afraid he did," ZhouYang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Althoughhe realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his puter and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading. ¡°This will look very good on the page,¡± she said. "Where is a good picture of this man?" Then as the article was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang's story. "You are really able to write a good front page article," she said. Zhou Yang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. "Well done," he said to Zhou Yang. "But please show me your evidence so we're sure we've got our facts straight.¡±¡°I¡¯ll bring it to you immediately," said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were bined they made a coloured page for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. "Wait 611 tonight," his friend whispered. "I expectthere will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!"Unit 5 First aidFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun'sharmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very plex: it keeps you warmor cool; it prevents your body from losing too much water; it is where you feel cold, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if yourskin gets burned it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first stepin the treatment of bums.Causes of burnsYou can get burned by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to high heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.●First degree burns These affect only the top layer of the skin. These burnsare not serious and should feel better within a day or two. Examples include mildsunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for a mordent.●Second degree burns These affect both the top and the second layer of the skin.These bums are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severesunburn and bums caused by hot liquids.●Third degree burns These affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue andorgans under the skin. Examples include burns caused by electric shocks,burning clothes, or severe petrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once.Characteristics of burnsFirst degree burns●dry, red and mildly swollen●mildly painful●turn white when pressedSecond degree burns●rough, red and swollen●blisters●watery surface●extremely painfulThird degree burns●black and white and charred●swollen; often tissue under them can be seen●little or no pain if nerves are damaged; maybe pain around edge of injured area.First aid treatment1Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burnsunder gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain being unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the painis not so bad. For second degree burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back ina basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burned area overand over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rob, as this may break any blisters and thewound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin.Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on bums as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If bums are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. Ifbums are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree bums, it is vital to get the victimto the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECEIVES AWARDSeventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who had saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John's quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade's life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade's hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived."I'm proud of what I did but I was just doing what I'd been taught," John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, "There is no doubt that John's quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade's life. It shows that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference."Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
高中英语课本必修5
必修5 Unit 1JOHH SHOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London - so expert, indeed, that he attend ed Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he tho ught about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly diseas e of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be contr olled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera kille d people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air. A cloud of dangero us gas floated around until it found its victims. The second suggested that people absorbed this disease into their bodies with their meals. From the stomach the dis ease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evide nce. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his en quiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gat her information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people had liv ed. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the de aths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 16, 37, 38 an d 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he mad e further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 C ambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water f rom the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame.Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He imm ediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away fr om Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certaint y that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source o f all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to polluted water any more. Finally "King Cholera" was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOL UTIONRRY THEORYNicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he h ad tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusio n: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun t here did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he couldnot tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have pun ished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the wo rld and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appe ared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went round it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematic al knowledge to explain them. But only his new theory could do that. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going round the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went round the sun and this expl ained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Coperni cus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his theory, saying it was against God's idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus' theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe arebuilt. His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to ea rth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus show ed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link betwe en his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking. 必修5 Unit 2PUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countr ies: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was chan ged to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King Ja mes of Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English g overnment tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by gettin g Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Irela nd was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ir eland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the curr ency and international relations), but they still have very different institutions. For e xample, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and lega l systems as well as different football teams for competitions like the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided r oughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, t he middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known a s the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the i ndustrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, the se cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football team s and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in th e nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to g o to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more ab out British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collectio ns, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national government and its ad ministration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle cons tructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There has been four sets of invaders of E ngland. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, infl uenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, t he Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these in vaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites s he wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. Fancy! This solid stone, square tow er had remained standing for one thousand years.Although the buildings had expan ded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her gre at surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldie rs who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the tim e of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 166 6. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the cl ock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of Buckingham Palace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous c lock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is ver y useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in Highgate Cemetery. It seemed st range that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Libr ary of the British Museum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other obj ects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for Windsor Castle. "Perhaps I will s ee the Queen?" she wondered as she fell asleep.必修5 Unit 3FIRST IMPRESSIONSSpacemall: liqiang299A@ 15/11/3008 (Earthtim e)Dear Mum and Dad, I still cannot believe that I am taking up this prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Wo rried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffere d from “Time lag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first. However, my friend and guide, Wang Ping, was very under standing and gave me some green tablets which helped a lot. Well-known for their expertise, his parents' company, called "Future Tours", transported me safely into t he future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to t he capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortabl e and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule bega n swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one tho usand years in the future. What would I find?At first my new surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gases had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situ ation, Wang Ping appeared. "Put on this mask," he advised. "It'll make you feel mu ch better." He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small roo m nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again an d following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can mo ve swiftly. Wang Ping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wang Ping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all dire ctions. He was swept up into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a "tim e lag" flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I re alized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wang Ping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean ro om. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved - it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much -needed oxygen. Then Wang Ping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a t able and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. "Why not sit down and eat a little?" he said. "You may find this difficult as it is your first time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow yo u'll be ready for some visits." Having said this, he spread some food on the table,and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot ba th. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modem in space. De scribed as an enormous round plate, it spins slowly in space to imitate the pull of the earth's gravity. Inside was an exhibition of the most up-to-date inventions of the 31 st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we're going to examine o ne of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages c an now be sent using a "thoughtpad". You place the metal band over your head, c lear your mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it's sent. It's stored on the "thoughtpad" of the receiver. It's quick, efficient and envi ronmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her mes sage clearly, an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called "thoughtpads " on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! Whil e I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the "environment area". People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burne d, am I fight? (We nodded.) Well, now there's a system where the waste is dispos ed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, sw allows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as "fertilizer" for the fields and "soil" for deserts. Nothing is wasted, and everything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn't' it?I stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space stations like this o ne. A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies hav e to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they're transpor ted by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do? My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.必修5 Unit 4 Making the news-ReadingMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT"Unforgettable", says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang (ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin (HX), was to strongl y influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We're delighted you're coming to work with us. Your first job he re will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions?ZY: Can I go out on a story immediately?HX: (laughing) That' s admirable, but I' m afraid it would be unusual ! Wait till you' re more experienced. First we'll put you as an assistant to an experienced j ournalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful. What do I need to take with me? I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You'll have a professional photographer with you t o take photographs. You'll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you m ay be able to concentrate on photography later if you' re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amate ur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story?HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you acquire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must hav e a good "nose" for a story. That means you must be able to assess when peopleare not telling the whole troth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here comes my list of dos and don'ts: don't miss your deadline, don't be rode, don't talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes?HX: This is a trick of the trade, If the interviewee agrees, you can use a reco rder to get the facts straight. It's also useful if a person wants to challenge you. Y ou have the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalist s of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A footballer was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the ot her team win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sc eptical. So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bribe him. When we saw them together we guessed from the footballer's body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he w as guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real "scoop". I'm looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I'll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTING THE "SCOOP""Quick," said the editor. "Get that story ready. We need it in this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop." Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. "Did he really do that?" asked someone from the International News Department. "Yes, I' m afraid he did," Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directl y. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months o f training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading. “This will look very good on the page,” she said. "Wh ere is a good picture of this man?" Then as the article was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a co py to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang's story. "You are really able to write a good front page article," she said. Zhou Yang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief ed itor read it and approved it. "Well done," he said to Zhou Yang. "But please showme your evidence so we're sure we've got our facts straight.” “I’ll b ring it to you i mmediately," said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be proc essed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They ne eded four negatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they m ade a coloured page for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. "Wait 61 1 tonight," his friend whispered. "I expect there will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!"必修5 Unit 5 First aid-ReadingFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have thr ee layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun's har mful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from losing too much water; it is where you feel cold, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burned it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of bums.Causes of burnsYou can get burned by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (b y being close to high heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending onwhich layers of the skin are burned.◎First degree burns These affect only the top layer of the skin. These burn s are not serious and should feel better within a day or two. Examples include mil d sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for a mordent.◎Second degree burns These affect both the top and the second layer of th e skin. These bums are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburn and bums caused by hot liquids.◎Third degree burns These affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue and organs under the skin. Examples include burns caused by electric shocks, bu rning clothes, or severe petrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuries and th e victim must go to hospital at once.Characteristics of burnsFirst degree burns◎dry, red and mildly swollen◎mildly painful◎turn white when pressedSecond degree burns◎rough, red and swollen◎blisters◎watery surface◎extremely painfulThird degree burns◎black and white and charred◎swollen; often tissue under them can be seen◎little or no pain if nerves are damaged; may be pain around edge of injure d area.First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burn s under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burni ng process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degree burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back i n a basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burned area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rob, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on bu ms as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If bums are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If bums are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree bums, it is vital to get the victim t o the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECEIVES AWARDSeventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awa rds last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a sh ocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the brave ry of ten people who had saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his fa ther rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her fr ont garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John's quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade's lif e. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobo dy could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade's hands. H e slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and am bulance arrived."I'm proud of what I did but I was just doing what I'd been taught," John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, "There is no doubt that John's quick thinking and the first aid skills he learne d at school saved Ms Slade's life. It shows that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference."Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers a ttended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
人教版高中英语必修5各单元课文原文
Unit 1 Great scientists“KING CHOLERA”JOHH SHOW DEFEATSJohn Snow was a famous doctor in London -so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air. A cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. The second suggested that people absorbed this disease into their bodies with their meals. From the stomachthe disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people had lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 16, 37, 38 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame.Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets.He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to polluted water any more. Finally "King Cholera" was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONRRY THEORYNicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun theredid the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth wasthe centre of the solar system and all planets went round it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only his new theory could do that. So between 1510and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to theold theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going round the earth. Healso suggested that the earth was spinning as it went round the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it ashe lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his theory, saying it was against God's idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus' theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built.His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earthbecause God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century.Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King Jamesof Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they still have very differentinstitutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal systems as well as different football teams for competitionslike the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide,-famous football teams these cities are not as large as those in China, they have worldand some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have togo to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national governmentand its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There has been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth,the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was builtlong ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. Fancy! This solid stone, square tower had remained standing for one thousand years.Although the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of Londonin 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of Buckingham Palace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standingon either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in Highgate Cemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the British Museum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, shefelt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for Windsor Castle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen?" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 Life in the futureFIRST IMPRESSIONSSpacemall: liqiang299A@ 15/11/3008 (Earthtime) Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up this prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, Iwas unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from “Time lag”. This isyou get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks similar to the “jet lag” from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first. However, my friend and guide, Wang Ping, was very understanding and gave me some green tablets which helped a lot. Well-known for their expertise, his parents' company, called "Future Tours", transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I find?At first my new surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gases had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of freshair, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wang Ping appeared. "Put on this mask," he advised. "It'll make you feel much better." He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wang Ping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wang Ping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was sweptup into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a "time lag" flashback and sawthe area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wang Ping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved- it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room withmuch-needed oxygen. Then Wang Ping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. "Why not sit down and eat a little?" he said. "You may find this difficult as it is your first time travel trip.Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you'llbe ready for some visits." Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modem in space. Described as an enormous round plate, it spins slowly in space to imitate the pullof the earth's gravity. Inside was an exhibition of the most up-to-date inventionsof the 31 st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we're going to examineone of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages c an now be sent using a "thoughtpad". You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, think your message a nd the next instant it's sent. It's stored on the "thoughtpad" of the receiver. It's quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly,an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called "thoughtpads" on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the "environment area". People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I fight? (We nodded.) Well, now there's a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, suchas "fertilizer" for the fields and "soil" for deserts. Nothing is wasted, andeverything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn't' it?I stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space stations like this one.A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste,no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they're transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do? My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 Making the newsMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT"Unforgettable", says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang (ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin (HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We're delighted you're coming to work with us. Your first job herewill be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions?ZY: Can I go out on a story immediately?HX: (laughing) That' s admirable, but I' m afraid it would be unusual ! Wait tillyou' re more experienced. First we'll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful. What do I need to take with me? I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You'll have a professional photographer with you to take photographs. You'll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you' re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story?HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you acquire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a good "nose" for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole troth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here comes my list of dos and don'ts: don't miss your deadline, don't be rode, don't talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes?HX: This is a trick of the trade, If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorderto get the facts straight. It's also useful if a person wants to challenge you. Youhave the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A footballer was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the otherteam win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical.So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bribe him. When we saw them together we guessed from the footballer's body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemmabecause the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried tostop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real "scoop". I'm looking forward to my first assignmentnow. Perhaps I'll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTING THE "SCOOP""Quick," said the editor. "Get that story ready. We need it in this editionto be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop." Zhou Yang had just come backinto the office after an interview with a famous film star. "Did he really do that?"asked someone from the International News Department. "Yes, I' m afraid he did," ZhouYang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Althoughhe realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly.He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of traininghad taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computerand began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department.-editor. She beganHe checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copyto edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading. ?°This will look very good on the page,?± she said. "Where is a good picture of this man?" Then as thearticle was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the nativespeaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy withZhou Yang's story. "You are really able to write a good front page article," she said.Zhou Yang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it."Well done," he said to Zhou Yang. "But please show me your evidence so we're surewe've got our facts straight.?± ?°I?ˉll bring it to you immediately," said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories andphotos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processedinto film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed fournegatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the maincolours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a colouredpage for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. ZhouYang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. "Wait 611 tonight," his friendwhispered. "I expect there will be something about this on the television news. A realscoop!"Unit 5 First aidFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun's harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from losing too much water; it is where you feel cold, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burned it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first stepin the treatment of bums.Causes of burnsYou can get burned by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to high heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.First degree burns These affect only the top layer of the skin. These burnsare not serious and should feel better within a day or two. Examples includemild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for amordent.Second degree burns These affect both the top and the second layer of theskin.These bums are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburn and bums caused by hot liquids.Third degree burns These affect all three layers of the skin and any tissueand organs under the skin. Examples include burns caused by electric shocks,burning clothes, or severe petrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuriesand the victim must go to hospital at once.Characteristics of burnsFirst degree burnsdry, red and mildly swollenmildly painfulturn white when pressedSecond degree burnsrough, red and swollenblisterswatery surfaceextremely painfulThird degree burnsblack and white and charredswollen; often tissue under them can beseenlittle or no pain if nerves are damaged; maybe pain around edge of injured area.First aid treatment1Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the painis not so bad. For second degree burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back ina basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burned area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rob, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on bums as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If bums are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If bums are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree bums, it is vital to get the victimto the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECEIVES AWARDSeventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who had saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John's quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade's life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade's hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived."I'm proud of what I did but I was just doing what I'd been taught," John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, "There is no doubt that John's quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade's life. It shows that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference."Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
2021年人教版 英语 必修五 课文 电子版
Unit 1 GREAT SCIENTISTS欧阳光明(2021.03.07)JOHN SNOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London — so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air, a cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. From the stomach the disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets,the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people have lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 163738 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame,Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extraevidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to polluted water any more. Finally “King Cholera” was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONAY THEORY Nicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun there did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went around it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only new theory could do that. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going around the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went around the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his theory, saying it was against God’s idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus’ theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built. His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King James of Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they will have very different institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal system as well as different football terms for competitions like the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in theMidlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to go to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national government and its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There have been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. This solid stone, square tower had remained standing for one thousand years. Although the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyufound the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of BuckinghamPalace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in HighgateCemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the BritishMuseum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for WindsorCastle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen?" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 LIFE IN THE FUTUREFIRST IMPRESSIONSSpacemail:liqiang299A@15/11/3008( earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up the prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from“time flag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first, however, my friend and guide, Wangping, was very understanding and gave some green tablets which helped a lot. Well- know for their expertise, his parents’ company, called “Future Tours”, transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we layrelaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I find?At first my surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gas had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wangping appeared. “Put on this mask,” he advised. “it’ll make you feel much better.” He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wangping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wangping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was swept up into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a “time lag” flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wangping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting.Suddenly the wall moved- it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much-needed oxygen. Then Wangping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. “Why not sit down and eat a little?” he said. “You may found this difficult as it is your first time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you’ll be ready for some visits.” Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modern in space. Described as an enormous round plate, it spins slowly in space to imitate the pull of the earth’s gravity. Inside was an exhibition f the most up-to-date inventions of the 31st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we’re going to examine one of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No morepostage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a “thoughtpad”. You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it’s sent. It’s stored on the “thoughtpad” of the receiver. It’s quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly, an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called “thoughtpads” on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the “environment area”. People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I right? ( We nodded.) Well, now there’s a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as “fertilizer” for the fields and “soil” for deserts. Nothing is wasted, and everything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn’t it?I stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space station like this one. A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they’re transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do? My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 MAKING THE NEWSMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT“Unforgettable”, says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang( ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, HuXin( HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We’re delighted you’re coming to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions?ZY: Can I get out on a story immediately?HX:(laughing) That’s admirable, but I’m afraid it would be unusual! Wait till you’re more experienced. First we’ll put you as an assis tant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful! What do I need to take with me? I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You’ll have a professional photographer with you to take photographs. You’ll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you’re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story?HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you admire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a good “nose” for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole truth and then try todiscover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here comes m y list of dos and don’ts: don’ts miss your deadline, don’t be rude, don’t talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes?HX: This is a trick of the trade. If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorder to get the facts straight. It’s also useful if a person wants to challenge you. You have the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A football was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the other team win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical. So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bride him. When we sawhim together we guessed from the footballer’s body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real “scoop”. I’m looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I’ll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTINH THE “SCOOP”“Quick,” said the editor. “Get that s tory ready. We need it in this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop.” Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. “Did he really do that?” asked someone from the International News Depart ment. “Yes, I’m afraid he did,” Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading, “This will look very good on the page,” she said. “Where is a good picture of this man?” Then as the article was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang’s story. “You are really able to write a good front page article,” she said, Zhou Yang sm iled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. “Well done,” he said to Zhou Yang. “But please show me your evidence so we’re sure we’ve got our facts straight.” “I’ll bring it to you immediately,”said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured age for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excite dly for the first copies to be ready. “Wait till tonight,” his friend whispered. “I expect there will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!”Unit 5 FIRST AIDFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun’s harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from loosing too much water; it is where you feel cool, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burnt it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of burns. Causes of burnsyou can get burnt by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals. Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.First degree burnsThese affect only the top layer of the skin. These burns are notserious and should feel better within a day or two. Examples include mild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for a moment.●Second degree burnsThese affect both the top and the second layer of the skin. Theseburns are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburn and burns caused by hot liquids.●Three degree burnsThese affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue and organsunder the skin. Examples include burns caused by electric shocks, burning clothes, or severe petrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once.Characteristic of burnsFirst degree burns●dry, red and mildly swollen●mildly painful●turn white when pressedSecond degree burns●rough, red and swollen●blisters●watery surface●extremely painfulThree degree burns●black and white and charred●swollen; often tissue under them can be seen●little or no pain if nerves are damaged; may be pain around edge ofinjured area.First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degrees burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back in a basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burnt area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rub, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on burns as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If burns are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If burns are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree burns, it is vital to get the victim to the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECERIVES AWARD Seventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.*欧阳光明*创编 2021.03.07It was John’s qui ck action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade’s life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade’s hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived.“I’m proud of what I did but I was just doing what I’d been taught,” John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr. Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, “There is no doubt that John’s quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade’s life. It shows tha t a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference.”Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.*欧阳光明*创编 2021.03.07。
高中英语必修五课文及其翻译
必修5Unit 1 Great scientistsReadingJOHH SHOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London - so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air. A cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. The second suggested that people absorbed this disease into their bodies with their meals. From the stomach the disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people had lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 16, 37, 38 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame.Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to polluted water any more. Finally "King Cholera" was defeated.Using LanguageCOPERNICUS’ REVOLUTION RRY THEORYNicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun there did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went round it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only his new theory could do that. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going round the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went round the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his theory, saying it was against God's idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus' theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built. His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomReadingPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King James of Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they still have very different institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal systems as well as different football teams for competitions like the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to go to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national government and its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There has been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.Using LanguageSIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. Fancy! This solid stone, square tower had remained standing for one thousand the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of Buckingham Palace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in Highgate Cemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the British Museum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for Windsor Castle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 Life in the futureReadingFIRST IMPRESSIONSSpacemall 15/11/3008 (Earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up this prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from “Time lag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first. However, my friend and guide, Wang Ping, was very understanding and gave me some green tablets which helped a lot. Well-known for their expertise, his parents' company, called "Future Tours", transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in througha small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I findAt first my new surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gases had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wang Ping appeared. "Put on this mask," he advised. "It'll make you feel much better." He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wang Ping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wang Ping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was swept up into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a "time lag" flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wang Ping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved - it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much-needed oxygen. Then Wang Ping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. "Why not sit down and eat a little" he said. "You may find this difficult as it is your first time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you'll be ready for some visits." Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangUsing LanguageI HA VE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modem in space. Described as an enormous round plate, it spins slowly in space to imitate the pull of the earth's gravity. Inside was an exhibition of the most up-to-date inventions of the 31 st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we're going to examine one of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a "thoughtpad". You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it's sent. It's stored on the "thoughtpad" of the receiver. It's quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly, an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can weDuring the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called "thoughtpads" on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the "environment area". People used to collect waste in dustbins.Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I fight (We nodded.) Well, now there's a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as "fertilizer" for the fields and "soil" for deserts. Nothing is wasted, and everything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn't' itI stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space stations like this one. A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they're transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 Making the newsReadingMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT"Unforgettable", says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang (ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin (HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We're delighted you're coming to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist.Do you have any questionsZY: Can I go out on a story immediatelyHX: (laughing) That' s admirable, but I' m afraid it would be unusual ! Wait till you' re more experienced. First we'll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful. What do I need to take with me I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You'll have a professional photographer with you to take photographs. You'll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you' re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a storyHX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you acquire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a good "nose" for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole troth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mindHX: Here comes my list of dos and don'ts: don't miss your deadline, don't be rode, don't talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so importantHX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notesHX: This is a trick of the trade, If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorder to get the facts straight. It's also useful if a person wants to challenge you. You have the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A footballer was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the other team win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical. So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bribe him. When we saw them together we guessed from the footballer's body language that he was nottelling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real "scoop". I'm looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I'll get a scoop too! HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.Using LanguageGETTING THE "SCOOP""Quick," said the editor. "Get that story ready. We need it in this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop." Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. "Did he really do that" asked someone from the International News Department. "Yes, I' m afraid he did," Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading. “This will look very good on the page,” she said. "Where is a good picture of this man" Then as the article was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang's story. "You are really able to write a good front page article," she said. Zhou Yang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. "Well done," he said to Zhou Yang. "But please show me your evidence so we're sure we've got our facts straight.” “I’ll bring it to you immediately," said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured page for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. "Wait 611 tonight," his friend whispered. "I expect there will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!"Unit 5 First aidReadingFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrieragainst disease, poisons and the sun's harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from losing too much water; it is where you feel cold, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burned it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of bums.Causes of burnsYou can get burned by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to high heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending onwhich layers of the skin are burned.◎First degree burns These affect only the top layer of the skin. These burns are not serious and should feel better within a day or two. Examples include mild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for a mordent.◎Second degree burns These affect both the top and the second layer of the skin. These bums are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburn and bums caused by hot liquids.◎Third degree burns These affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue and organs under the skin.Examples include burns caused by electric shocks, burning clothes, or severe petrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once.Characteristics of burnsFirst degree burns◎dry, red and mildly swollen◎mildly painful◎turn white when pressedSecond degree burns◎rough, red and swollen◎blisters◎watery surface◎extremely painfulThird degree burns◎black and white and charred◎swollen; often tissue under them can be seen◎little or no pain if nerves are damaged; may be pain around edge of injured area. First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reducesswelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degree burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back in a basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burned area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rob, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on bums as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If bums are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If bums are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree bums, it is vital to get the victim to the doctor or hospital at once.Using LanguageHEROIC TEENAGER RECEIVES AW ARDSeventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who had saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John's quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade's life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade's hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived."I'm proud of what I did but I was just doing what I'd been taught," John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, "There is no doubt that John's quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade's life. It shows that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference."Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
高中英语必修五课文及其翻译
高中英语必修五课文及其翻译-CAL-FENGHAI.-(YICAI)-Company One1必修5Unit 1 Great scientistsReadingJOHH SHOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London - so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air. A cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. The second suggested that people absorbed this disease into their bodies with their meals. From the stomach the disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died. John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people had lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 16, 37, 38 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame.Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to polluted water any more. Finally "King Cholera" was defeated.Using LanguageC OPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONRRY THEORYNicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun there did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went round it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only his new theory could do that. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going round the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went round the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his theory, saying it was against God's idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus' theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built. His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomReadingPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King James of Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they still have very different institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal systems as well as different football teams for competitions like the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to go to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national government and its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There has been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.Using LanguageSIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. Fancy! This solid stone, square tower had remained standing for one thousandyears.Although the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of Buckingham Palace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in Highgate Cemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he hadworked in the famous reading room of the Library of the British Museum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for Windsor Castle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 Life in the futureReadingFIRST IMPRESSIONSSpacemall: liqiang299A@ 15/11/3008 (Earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up this prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from “Time lag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first. However, my friend and guide, Wang Ping, was very understanding and gave me some green tablets which helped a lot. Well-known for their expertise, his parents' company, called "Future Tours", transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I find?At first my new surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gases had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wang Ping appeared. "Put on this mask," he advised. "It'll make you feel much better." He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wang Ping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wang Ping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was swept up into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a "time lag" flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wang Ping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved - it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much-needed oxygen. Then Wang Ping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. "Why not sit down and eat a little" he said. "You may find this difficult as it is your first time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you'll be ready for some visits." Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangUsing LanguageI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modem in space. Described as an enormous round plate, it spins slowly in space to imitate the pull of the earth's gravity. Inside was an exhibition of the most up-to-date inventions of the 31 st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we're going to examine one of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a "thoughtpad".You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, thinkyour message and the next instant it's sent. It's stored on the "thoughtpad" of the receiver. It's quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not thinkhis or her message clearly, an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the toolsfor the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called "thoughtpads" on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the "environment area". People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I fight (We nodded.) Well, now there's a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as "fertilizer" for the fields and "soil" for deserts.Nothing is wasted, and everything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn't' itI stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space stations like this one. A group of engineersprogramme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmentaldamage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they're transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 Making the newsReadingMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT"Unforgettable", says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang (ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin (HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist. HX: Welcome. We're delighted you're coming to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions?ZY: Can I go out on a story immediately?HX: (laughing) That' s admirable, but I' m afraid it would be unusual ! Wait till you' re more experienced. First we'll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you cancover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful. What do I need to take with me I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You'll have a professional photographer with you to take photographs.You'll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate onphotography later if you' re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story?HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you acquire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a good "nose" for a story.That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole troth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of thestory.ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here comes my list of dos and don'ts: don't miss your deadline, don't be rode, don't talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes?HX: This is a trick of the trade, If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorder to get the facts straight. It's also useful if a person wants to challenge you. You have the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A footballer was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the other team win. We went tointerview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical. So we arranged an interviewbetween the footballer and the man supposed to bribe him. When we saw them together we guessed from the footballer's body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could havedemanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we wereproved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real "scoop". I'm looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I'll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.Using LanguageGETTING THE "SCOOP""Quick," said the editor. "Get that story ready. We need it in this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop." Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. "Did he really do that" asked someone from the International News Department. "Yes, I' m afraid he did," Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading. “This will look very good on the page,” she said. "Where is a good picture of this man" Then as the article was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang's story. "You are really able to write a good front page article," she said. Zhou Yang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. "Well done," he said to Zhou Yang. "But please show me your evidence so we're sure we've got our facts straight.” “I’ll bring it to you immediately," said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured page for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed.Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. "Wait 611 tonight," his friend whispered. "I expect there will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!"Unit 5 First aidReadingFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun's harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from losing too much water; it is where you feel cold, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burned it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of bums.Causes of burnsYou can get burned by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to high heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.◎ First degree burns These affect only the top layer of the skin. These burns are not serious and should feel better within a day or two. Examples include mild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for a mordent.◎ Second degree burns These affect both the top and the second layer of the skin. These bums are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburn and bums caused by hot liquids.◎ Third degree burns These affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue and organs under the skin. Examples include burns caused by electric shocks, burning clothes, or severe petrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once. Characteristics of burnsFirst degree burns◎ dry, red and mildly swollen◎ mildly painful◎ turn white when pressedSecond degree burns◎ rough, red and swollen◎ blisters◎ watery surface◎ extremely painfulThird degree burns◎ black and white and charred◎ swollen; often tissue under them can be seen◎ little or no pain if nerves are damaged; may be pain around edge of injuredarea.First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degree burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back in a basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burned area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rob, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on bums as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If bums are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If bums are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree bums, it is vital to get the victim to the doctor or hospital at once.Using LanguageHEROIC TEENAGER RECEIVES AWARDSeventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack. John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who had saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John's quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade's life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, hisfather got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade's hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived."I'm proud of what I did but I was just doing what I'd been taught," John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, "There is no doubt that John's quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade's life. It shows that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference."Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
人教版 英语 必修五 课文 电子版之欧阳法创编
Unit 1 GREAT SCIENTISTSJOHN SNOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London — so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air, a cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. From the stomach the disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people have lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 163738 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame,Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to polluted water any more. Finally “King Cholera” was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONAY THEORY Nicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun there did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went around it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only new theory could do that. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going around the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went around the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his th eory, saying it was against God’s idea and people who supported it would be attacked. YetCopernicus’ theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built. His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this wasaccomplished without conflict when King James of Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they will have very different institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal system as well as different football terms for competitions like the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, themiddle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to go to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national government and its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There have been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their townsand roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. This solid stone, square tower had remained standing for one thousand years. Although the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions,still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of BuckinghamPalace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in HighgateCemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the BritishMuseum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for WindsorCastle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen?" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 LIFE IN THE FUTUREFIRST IMPRESSIONSSpacemail:liqiang299A@ 15/11/3008(earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up the prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from“time flag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first, however, my friend and guide, Wangping, was very understanding and gave some green tablets which helped a lot. Well- know for their expertise, his parents’ company, called “Future Tours”, transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes.The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I find?At first my surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gas had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wangping appeared. “Put on this mask,” he advised. “it’ll make you feel much better.” He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wangping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wangping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was swept upinto the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a “time lag” flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wangping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved- it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much-needed oxygen. Then Wangping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. “Why not sit down and eat a little?” he said. “You may found this difficult as it is your first time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you’ll be ready for some visits.” Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGS My first visit was to a space station considered the most modern in space. Described as an enormous round plate, it spins s lowly in space to imitate the pull of the earth’s gravity. Inside was an exhibition f the most up-to-date inventions of the 31st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we’re going t o examine one of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a “thoughtpad”. You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it’s sent. It’s stored on the “thoughtpad” of the receiver. It’s quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly, an unclearmessage may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called “thoughtpads” on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the “environment area”. People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I right? ( We nodded.) Well, now there’s a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as “fertilizer” for the fields an d “soil” for deserts. Nothing is wasted, and everything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn’t it?I stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space station like this one. A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they’re transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do? My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 MAKING THE NEWSMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT“Unforgettable ”, says new journali stNever will Zhou Yang( ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin( HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We’re delighted you’re coming to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions?ZY: Can I get out on a story immediately?HX:(laughing) That’s admirable, but I’m afraid it would be unusual! Wait till you’re more experienced. First we’ll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful! What do I need to take with me? I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You’ll have a professional photographer wit h you to take photographs. You’ll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you’re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story?HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you admire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a good “nose” for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole truth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here c omes my list of dos and don’ts: don’ts miss your deadline, don’t be rude, don’t talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes? HX: This is a trick of the trade. If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorder to get the facts straight. It’s also useful if a person wants to challenge you. You have the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A football was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the other team win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical. So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bride him. When we saw him together we guessed from the footballer’s body language that he was not telling thetruth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real “scoop”. I’m looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I’ll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTINH THE “SCOOP”“Quick,” said the editor. “Get that story ready. We need it in this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop.” Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. “Did he really do that?” asked someone from the International News Department. “Yes, I’m afraid he did,” Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. Hewould have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading, “This will look very good on the page,” she said. “Where is a good picture of this man?” Then as the article was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang’s story. “You are really able to write a good front page article,” she said, Zhou Y ang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. “Well done,” he said to Zhou Yang. “But please show me your evidence so we’re sure we’ve got our facts straight.” “I’ll bring it to you immediately,”said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured age for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. “Wait till tonight,” his friend whispered. “I expect there will be something about this on the television news.A real scoop!”Unit 5 FIRST AIDFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun’s harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps youwarm or cool; it prevents your body from loosing too much water; it is where you feel cool, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burnt it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of burns. Causes of burnsyou can get burnt by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.First degree burnsThese affect only the top layer of the skin. These burns are not serious and should feel better within a day ortwo. Examples include mild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for a moment.●Second degree burnsThese affect both the top and the second layer of the skin. These burns are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburn and burnscaused by hot liquids.●Three degree burnsThese affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue and organs under the skin. Examples include burnscaused by electric shocks, burning clothes, or severepetrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once. Characteristic of burnsFirst degree burns●dry, red and mildly swollen●mildly painful●turn white when pressedSecond degree burns●rough, red and swollen●blisters●watery surface●extremely painfulThree degree burns●black and white and charred●swollen; often tissue under them can be seen●little or no pain if nerves are damaged; may be painaround edge of injured area.First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process,prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degrees burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back in a basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burnt area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rub, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on burns as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If burns are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If burns are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree burns, it is vital to get the victim to the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECERIVES AWARD Seventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John’s quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade’s life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treatthe most severe injuries to Ms Slade’s hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived.“I’m proud of what I did but I was just doing what I’d been taught,” John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr. Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, “There is no doubt that John’s quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade’s life. It shows that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference.”Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
人教版 英语 必修五 课文 电子版之欧阳语创编
Unit 1 GREAT SCIENTISTSJOHN SNOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London — so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air, a cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. From the stomach the disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people have lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 163738 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame,Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed notto expose people to polluted water any more. Finally “King Cholera” was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONAY THEORY Nicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun there did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went around it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only new theory could do that. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going around the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went around the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his theory, saying it was againstGod’s idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus’ theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built. His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking. Unit 2 The United KingdomPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenthcentury and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King James of Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they will have very different institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal system as well asdifferent football terms for competitions like the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to go to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national government and its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There have been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. This solid stone, square tower had remained standing for one thousand years. Although the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of deadpoets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of BuckinghamPalace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in HighgateCemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had workedin the famous reading room of the Library of the BritishMuseum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for WindsorCastle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen?" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 LIFE IN THE FUTUREFIRST IMPRESSIONS Spacemail:liqiang299A@GreatAdventureSpaceStation. com15/11/3008(earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up the prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from“time flag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first, however, my friend and guide, Wangping, was very understanding and gave some green tablets which helped a lot. Well- know for their expertise, his parents’ company, called “Future Tours”, transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I find?At first my surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gas had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wangping appeared. “Put on this mask,” he advised. “it’ll make you feel much better.” He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wangping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wangping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was swept up into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a “time lag” flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into thefuture of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wangping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved- it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much-needed oxygen. Then Wangping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. “Why not sit down and eat a little?” he said. “You may found this difficult as it is your first time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you’ll be ready for some visits.” Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modern in space. Described as an enormous round plate, it spins slowly in space to imitate the pull of the earth’s gravity. Inside was an exhibition f the most up-to-date inventions of the 31st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path. G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we’re going t o examine one of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a “thoughtpad”. You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it’s sent. It’s stored on the “thoughtpad” of the receiver. It’s quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly, an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called “thoughtpads” on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on. G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the “environment area”. People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I right? ( We nodded.) Well, now there’s a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as “fertilizer” for the fields and “soil” for deserts. Nothing is wasted, and everything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn’t it?I stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on. G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space station like this one. A group of engineers programme robots toperform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they’re transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do? My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 MAKING THE NEWSMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT“Unforgettable”, says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang( ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin( HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We’re delighted you’re coming to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions?ZY: Can I get out on a story immediately?HX:(laughing) That’s admirable, but I’m afraid it would be unusual! Wait till you’re more experienced. First we’ll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful! What do I need to take with me? I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You’ll have a professional photographer wit h you to take photographs. You’ll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you’re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story?HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you admire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a g ood “nose” for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole truth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here c omes my list of dos and don’ts: don’ts miss your deadline, don’t be rude, don’t talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes?HX: This is a trick of the trade. If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorder to get the facts straight. It’s also useful if a person wants to challenge you. You have the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A football was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the other team win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical. So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bride him. When we saw him together we guessed from the footballer’s body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real “scoop”. I’m looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I’ll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTINH THE “SCOOP”“Quick,” said the editor. “Get that story ready. We need it in this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop.” Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. “Did he really do that?” asked someone from the International News Department. “Yes, I’m afraid he did,” Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading, “This will look very good on the page,” she said. “Where is a good picture of this man?” Then as the artic le was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang’s story. “You are really able to write a good front page article,” she said, Zhou Y ang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. “Well done,” he said to Zhou Yang. “But please show me your evidence so we’re sure we’ve got our facts straight.” “I’ll bring it to you immediately,”said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives,as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured age for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. “Wait till tonight,” his friend whispered. “I expect there will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!”Unit 5 FIRST AIDFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun’s harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from loosing too much water; it is where you feel cool, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burnt it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of burns.Causes of burnsyou can get burnt by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.●First degree burnsThese affect only the top layer of the skin. Theseburns are not serious and should feel better withina day or two. Examples include mild sunburn andburns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for a moment.●Second degree burnsThese affect both the top and the second layer of the skin. These burns are serious and take a fewweeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburnand burns caused by hot liquids.●Three degree burnsThese affect all three layers of the skin and anytissue and organs under the skin. Examples include burns caused by electric shocks, burning clothes, or severe petrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once. Characteristic of burnsFirst degree burns●dry, red and mildly swollen●mildly painful●turn white when pressedSecond degree burns●rough, red and swollen●blisters●watery surface●extremely painfulThree degree burns●black and white and charred●swollen; often tissue under them can be seenlittle or no pain if nerves are damaged; may be pain around edge of injured area.First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degrees burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back in a basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burnt area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rub, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on burns as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If burns are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If burns are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree burns, it is vital to get the victim to the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECERIVES AWARD Seventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, aman ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John’s quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade’s life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to t reat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade’s hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived.“I’m proud of what I did but I was just doing what I’d been taught,” John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr. Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, “There is no doubt that John’s quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at schoolsaved Ms Slade’s life. It sho ws that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference.”Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
人教版英语必修五课文电子版
Unit 1 GREAT SCIENTISTSJOHN SNOW DEFEATS“KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London—so expert, indeed, that he attended QueenVictoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air, a cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. From the stomach the disease quickly attacked thebody and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. Intwo particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people diedin ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people have lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 163738 and 40). He also noticed thatsome houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame,Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera wasspread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from BroadStreet, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried thevirus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to。
人教版高中英语必修五电子课本
人教版高中英语必修五电子课本John Snow。
___。
was not only Queen Victoria's personal physician but also a n for the ordinary people。
He was particularly ___ cholera。
___。
the cause and cure of ___.To this end。
___ in the air。
forming a cloud of dangerousgas that floated around until it found its victims。
The second ___ inside the body。
the disease quickly attacked the victim's system。
leading to ___.John Snow was ___.___ second theory was correct。
but ___。
So。
when another outbreak hit London in 1854.he was ready to begin his ___。
he began to gather n。
In two particular streets。
___ more than 500 people died in ten days。
He was determined to find out why.To start his n。
John Snow marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people had lived。
This gave him a valuableclue about the cause of the disease。
Many of the deaths were nearthe water pump in Broad Street。
人教版高中英语必修5各单元课文原文
Unit 1 Great scientistsJOHH SHOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London - so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its causewas found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholerakilled people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air. A cloud ofdangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. The second suggested thatpeople absorbed this disease into their bodies with their meals. From the stomachthe disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died. John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people had lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 16, 37, 38 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame.Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets.He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. Heimmediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from thepump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He hadshown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from twoother deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the sourceof all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not toexpose people to polluted water any more. Finally "King Cholera" was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONRRY THEORYNicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion:that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun theredid the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tellanyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him foreven suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system. The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in thesky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appearedbrighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth wasthe centre of the solar system and all planets went round it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to findan answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematicalknowledge to explain them. But only his new theory could do that. So between 1510and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to theold theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of thesolar systemwith the planets going round it and only the moon still going round the earth. Healso suggested that the earth was spinning as it went round the sun and this explainedchanges in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friendswere enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it ashe lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his theory, saying it was against God's idea and people who supported it would be attacked. YetCopernicus' theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built.His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earthbecause God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed thiswas obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theoryand the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century.Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England andWales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changedto "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King Jamesof Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English governmenttried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Irelandconnected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, thecurrency and international relations), but they still have very different institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have differenteducational and legal systems as well as different football teams for competitionslike the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of theindustrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide,these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teamsand some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in thenineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have togo to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more aboutBritish history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, artcollections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national governmentand its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first centuryAD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castleconstructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There has been four sets of invaders ofEngland. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, theAnglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings,influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth,the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all theseinvaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the UnitedKingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sitesshe wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was builtlong ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. Fancy! This solid stone, square towerhad remained standing for one thousand the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise,Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of Londonin 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was veryinteresting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such asShakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous soundof the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at theoutside of Buckingham Palace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much totell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clockthat sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is animaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very usefulfor navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standingon either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in Highgate Cemetery. It seemedstrange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the British Museum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into anotherbuilding and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderfultreasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitorsenjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, shefelt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for Windsor Castle. "Perhaps I willsee the Queen" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 Life in the futureFIRST IMPRESSIONSSpacemall: 15/11/3008 (Earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up this prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from “Time lag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first. However, my friend and guide, Wang Ping, was very understanding and gave me some green tablets which helped a lot. Well-known for their expertise, his parents' company, called "Future Tours", transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all tothe capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortableand after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule beganswinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, thejourney was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousandyears in the future. What would I findAt first my new surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin,as though its combination of gases had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of freshair, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this newsituation, Wang Ping appeared. "Put on this mask," he advised. "It'll make you feelmuch better." He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small roomnearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again andfollowing him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages floatabove the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly.Wang Ping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly asfast as him. However, I lost sight of Wang Ping when we reached what looked like alarge market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was sweptup into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a "time lag" flashback and sawthe area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transportedinto the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wang Ping againand flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright cleanroom. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved- it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room withmuch-needed oxygen. Then Wang Ping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. "Why not sit down and eat a little" he said. "You may find this difficult as it is your first time travel trip.Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you'llbe ready for some visits." Having said this, he spread some food on the table, andproduced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modem in space.Described as an enormous round plate, it spins slowly in space to imitate the pullof the earth's gravity. Inside was an exhibition of the most up-to-date inventionsof the 31 st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we're going to examine one of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a "thoughtpad". You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it's sent. It's stored on the "thoughtpad" of the receiver. It's quick, efficient and environmentallyfriendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly,an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of theuser, can weDuring the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called "thoughtpads" on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the "environment area". People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am Ifight (We nodded.) Well, now there's a system where the waste is disposed of usingthe principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all thewaste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, suchas "fertilizer" for the fields and "soil" for deserts. Nothing is wasted, andeverything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn't' itI stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency.But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices.Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space stations like this one.A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots producegoods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste,no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train theirrepresentatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robotsand the production. When the goods are ready they're transported by industrialspaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do My motivation increased as Ithought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 Making the newsMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT"Unforgettable", says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang (ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin (HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We're delighted you're coming to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions ZY: Can I go out on a story immediatelyHX: (laughing) That' s admirable, but I' m afraid it would be unusual ! Wait tillyou' re more experienced. First we'll put you as an assistant to an experiencedjournalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful. What do I need to take with me I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You'll have a professional photographer with you to take photographs. You'll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you' re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a storyHX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you acquire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a good "nose" for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole troth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mindHX: Here comes my list of dos and don'ts: don't miss your deadline, don't be rode, don't talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so importantHX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare thenext question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notesHX: This is a trick of the trade, If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorderto get the facts straight. It's also useful if a person wants to challenge you. Youhave the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stickHX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A footballer wasaccused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the otherteam win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical.So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bribe him.When we saw them together we guessed from the footballer's body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemmabecause the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real "scoop". I'm looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I'll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTING THE "SCOOP""Quick," said the editor. "Get that story ready. We need it in this editionto be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop." Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. "Did he really do that"asked someone from the International News Department. "Yes, I' m afraid he did," ZhouYang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Althoughhe realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly.He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of traininghad taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department.He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading. ?°This will look very good on the page,?± she said. "Where is a good picture of this man" Then as the article was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed bythe newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang's story. "You are really able to write a good front page article," she said. Zhou Yang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. "Well done," he said to Zhou Yang. "But please show me your evidence so we're sure we've got our facts straight.?± ?°I?ˉll bring it to you immediately," said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured page for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. "Wait 611 tonight," his friend whispered. "I expect there will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!"Unit 5 First aidFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You havethree layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun'sharmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warmor cool; it prevents your body from losing too much water; it is where you feel cold,heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if yourskin gets burned it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first stepin the treatment of bums.Causes of burnsYou can get burned by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to high heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degreeburns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.First degree burns These affect only the top layer of the skin.These burnsare not serious and should feel better within a day or two. Examples include mild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for a mordent.Second degree burns These affect both the top and the second layerof the skin.These bums are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburn and bums caused by hot liquids.Third degree burns These affect all three layers of the skin andany tissue and organs under the skin. Examples include burns causedby electric shocks, burning clothes, or severe petrol fires. Theseburns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospitalat once.Characteristics of burnsFirst degree burnsdry, red and mildly swollenmildly painfulturn white when pressed Second degree burnsrough, red and swollenblisterswatery surfaceextremely painfulThird degree burnsblack and white and charredswollen; often tissue under them canbe seenlittle or no pain if nerves aredamaged; may be pain around edge ofinjured area.First aid treatment1Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn.Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burnsunder gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the painis not so bad. For second degree burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back ina basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burnedarea over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rob, as this may break any blisters and thewound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin.Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on bums asthey keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If bums are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. Ifbums are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree bums, it is vital to get the victimto the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECEIVES AWARDSeventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who had saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John's quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade'slife. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobodycould put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house.John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade's hands. He slowed thebleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived."I'm proud of what I did but I was just doing what I'd been taught," John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, "There is no doubt that John's quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade's life. It shows that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference."Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
人教版 英语 必修五 课文 电子版之欧阳道创编
Unit 1 GREAT SCIENTISTSJOHN SNOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London — so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air, a cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. From the stomach the disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people have lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 163738 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame,Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the riverpolluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to polluted water any more. Finally “King Cholera” was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONAY THEORYNicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun there did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went around it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only new theory could dothat. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going around the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went around the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his th eory, saying it was against God’s idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus’ theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built. His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicusshowed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King James of Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the UnitedKingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they will have very different institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal system as well as different football terms for competitions like the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to go to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It isthe centre of national government and its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There have been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. This solid stone, square tower had remained standing for one thousand years. Although the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guardedby special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of BuckinghamPalace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in HighgateCemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the BritishMuseum. Sadlythe library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for WindsorCastle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen?" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 LIFE IN THE FUTUREFIRST IMPRESSIONS Spacemail:liqiang299A@ 15/11/3008(earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up the prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from“time flag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous timeperiod. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first, however, my friend and guide, Wangping, was very understanding and gave some green tablets which helped a lot. Well- know for their expertise, his parents’ company, called “Future Tours”, transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I find?At first my surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gas had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wangping appeared. “Put on this mask,” he advised. “it’ll make you feel much better.” He handed it tome and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wangping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wangping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was swept up into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a “time lag” flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wangping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved- it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much-needed oxygen. Then Wangping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose fromunder the floor as if by magic. “Why not sit down and eat a little?” he said. “You may found this difficult as it is your first time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you’ll be ready for some visits.” Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modern in space. Described as an enormous round plate, it spins s lowly in space to imitate the pull of the earth’s gravity. Inside was an exhibition f the most up-to-date inventions of the 31st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we’re going to examine one of the latest forms of communicationamong our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a “thoughtpad”. You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it’s sent. It’s stored on the “thoughtpad” of the receiver. It’s quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly, an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called “thoughtpads” on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the “environment area”. People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I right? ( We nodded.) Well, now there’s a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all thewaste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as “fertilizer” for the fields and “soil” for deserts. Nothing is wasted, and everything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn’t it?I stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space station like this one. A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they’re transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do? My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 MAKING THE NEWSMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT“Unforgettable”, says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang( ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin( HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We’re delighted you’re coming to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions?ZY: Can I get out on a story immediately?HX:(laughing) That’s admirable, but I’m afraid it would be unusual! Wait till you’re more experienced. First we’ll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful! What do I need to take with me? I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You’ll have a professional photographer wit h you to take photographs. You’ll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you’re interested. ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story?HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you admire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a g ood “nose” for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole truth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here c omes my list of dos and don’ts: don’ts miss your deadline, don’t be rude, don’t talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes?HX: This is a trick of the trade. If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorder to get the facts straight. It’s also useful if a person wants to challenge you. You have the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A football was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the other team win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but wewere sceptical. So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bride him. When we saw him together we guessed from the footballer’s body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real “scoop”. I’m looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I’ll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTINH THE “SCOOP”“Quick,” said the editor. “Get that story ready. We need itin this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop.” Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. “Did he really do that?” asked someone from the International News Department. “Yes, I’m afraid he did,” Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading, “This will look very good on the page,” she said. “Where is a good picture of this man?” Then as the artic le was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang’s story. “You are really able to write a good front page article,” she said, Zhou Yang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. “Well done,” he said to Zhou Yang. “But please show me your evidence so we’resure we’ve got our facts straight.” “I’ll bring it to you immediately,”said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured age for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. “Wait till tonight,” his friend whispered. “I expect there will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!”Unit 5 FIRST AIDFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun’s harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps youwarm or cool; it prevents your body from loosing too much water; it is where you feel cool, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burnt it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of burns.Causes of burnsyou can get burnt by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.●First degree burnsThese affect only the top layer of the skin. These burns are not serious and should feel better within a day ortwo. Examples include mild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for a moment.●Second degree burnsThese affect both the top and the second layer of theskin. These burns are serious and take a few weeks toheal. Examples include severe sunburn and burns caused by hot liquids.●Three degree burnsThese affect all three layers of the skin and any tissueand organs under the skin. Examples include burnscaused by electric shocks, burning clothes, or severepetrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once.Characteristic of burnsFirst degree burns●dry, red and mildly swollen●mildly painful●turn white when pressedSecond degree burns●rough, red and swollen●blisters●watery surface●extremely painfulThree degree burns●black and white and charred●swollen; often tissue under them can be seen●little or no pain if nerves are damaged; may be painaround edge of injured area.First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degrees burns,keep cloths cool by putting them back in a basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burnt area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rub, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on burns as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If burns are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If burns are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree burns, it is vital to get the victim to the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECERIVES AWARD Seventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for givinglifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John’s quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade’s life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade’s hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived.“I’m proud of what I did but I was just doing what I’d been taught,” John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr. Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, “There is no doubt that John’s quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade’s life. It shows that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference.”Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
人教版 英语 必修五 课文 电子版之欧阳治创编
Unit 1 GREAT SCIENTISTSJOHN SNOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London — so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air, a cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. From thestomach the disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people have lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 163738 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had beengiven free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame,Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to polluted water any more. Finally “King Cholera” was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONAY THEORY Nicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun there did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, movebackward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went around it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only new theory could do that. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going around the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went around the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus wascautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his the ory, saying it was against God’s idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus’ theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built. His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King James of Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they will have very different institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have differenteducational and legal system as well as different football terms for competitions like the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to go to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national government and itsadministration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There have been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. This solid stone,square tower had remained standing for one thousand years. Although the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of BuckinghamPalace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is animaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in HighgateCemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the BritishMuseum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for WindsorCastle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen?" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 LIFE IN THE FUTUREFIRST IMPRESSIONS Spacemail:liqiang299A@GreatAdventureSpaceStation.co m15/11/3008(earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up the prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from“time flag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first, however, my friend and guide, Wangping, was very understanding and gave some green tablets which helped a lot. Well- know for their expertise, his parents’ company, called “Future Tours”, transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed inthrough a small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I find?At first my surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gas had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wangping appeared. “Put on this mask,” he advised. “it’ll make you feel much better.” He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wangping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wangping whenwe reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was swept up into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a “time lag” flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wangping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved- it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much-needed oxygen. Then Wangping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. “Why not sit down and eat a little?” he said. “You may found this difficult as it is your first time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you’ll be ready for some visits.” Having said this, he spread some food on the table, andproduced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGS My first visit was to a space station considered the most modern in space. Described as an enormous round plate, it spins sl owly in space to imitate the pull of the earth’s gravity. Inside was an exhibition f the most up-to-date inventions of the 31st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we’re going to examine one of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a “thoughtpad”. You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, thinkyour message and the next instant it’s sent. It’s stored on the “thoughtpad” of the receiver. It’s quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly, an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called “thoughtpads” on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the “environment area”. People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I right? ( We nodded.) Well, now t here’s a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as “fertilizer” for the fields and “soil” for deserts. Nothing is wasted, andeverything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn’t it?I stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space station like this one. A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they’re t ransported by industrial spaceship back to earth. My mind began to wander. What job would I do? My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 MAKING THE NEWSMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT“Unforgettable ”, says new journalis tNever will Zhou Yang( ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin( HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We’re delighted you’re coming to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions?ZY: Can I get out on a story immediately?HX:(laughing) That’s admirable, but I’m afraid it would be unusual! Wait till you’re more experienced. First we’ll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful! What do I need to take with me? I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You’ll have a professional photographer with you to take photographs. You’ll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you’re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story?HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you admire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a good “nose” for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole truth andthen try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here co mes my list of dos and don’ts: don’ts miss your deadline, don’t be rude, don’t talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully. ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes? HX: This is a trick of the trade. If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorder to get the facts straight. It’s also useful if a person wants to challenge you. You have the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A football was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the other team win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical. So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bride him. When we saw him together we guessed from the footballer’s body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real “scoop”. I’m looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I’ll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTINH THE “SCOOP”“Quick,” said the editor. “Get t hat story ready. We need it in this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers.This is a scoop.” Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. “Did he really do that?” asked someone from the International News D epartment. “Yes, I’m afraid he did,” Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading, “This will look very good on the page,” she said. “Where is a good picture of this man?” Then as the articl e was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speakeremployed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang’s story. “You are really able to write a good front page article,” she said, Zhou Yang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. “Well done,” he said to Zhou Yang. “But please show me your evidence so we’re sure we’ve got our facts straight.” “I’ll bring it to you immediately,”said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured age for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. “Wait till tonight,” his friend whispered. “Iexpect there will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!”Unit 5 FIRST AIDFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun’s harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from loosing too much water; it is where you feel cool, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burnt it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of burns. Causes of burnsyou can get burnt by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.●First degree burnsThese affect only the top layer of the skin. Theseburns are not serious and should feel better within aday or two. Examples include mild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for amoment.●Second degree burnsThese affect both the top and the second layer of the skin. These burns are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburn and burnscaused by hot liquids.●Three degree burnsThese affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue and organs under the skin. Examples include burnscaused by electric shocks, burning clothes, or severepetrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once. Characteristic of burnsFirst degree burns●dry, red and mildly swollen●mildly painful●turn white when pressedSecond degree burns●rough, red and swollen●blisters●watery surface●extremely painfulThree degree burns●black and white and charred●swollen; often tissue under them can be seenlittle or no pain if nerves are damaged; may be pain around edge of injured area.First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degrees burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back in a basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burnt area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rub, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on burns as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If burns are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If burns are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree burns, it is vital to get the victim to the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECERIVES AWARD Seventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John’s quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade’s life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade’s hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived.“I’m proud of what I did but I was just doing what I’d been taught,” John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr. Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said,“There is no doubt that John’s quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade’s life. It shows that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference.”Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
人教版 英语 必修五 课文 电子版之欧阳体创编
Unit 1 GREAT SCIENTISTSJOHN SNOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London — so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air, a cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. From the stomach the disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. Intwo particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people have lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 163738 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame,Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the waterfrom the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to polluted water any more. Finally “King Cholera” was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONAY THEORY Nicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun there did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less brightat others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went around it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only new theory could do that. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going around the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went around the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his th eory, saying it was against God’s idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus’ theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built. His theoryreplaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King James of Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they will have verydifferent institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal system as well as different football terms for competitions like the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to go to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national government and its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There have been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. This solid stone, square tower had remained standing for one thousand years. Although the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of BuckinghamPalace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the easternand western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in HighgateCemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the BritishMuseum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for WindsorCastle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen?" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 LIFE IN THE FUTUREFIRST IMPRESSIONS Spacemail:liqiang299A@15/11/30 08(earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up the prize that I won last year.I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008.Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from“time flag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first, however, my friend and guide, Wangping, was very understanding and gave some green tablets which helped a lot. Well- know for their expertise, his parents’ company, called “Future Tours”, transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I find?At first my surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gas had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wangping appeared. “Put on this mask,” he advised. “it’ll make you feel much better.” He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small roomnearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wangping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wangping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was swept up into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a “time lag” flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wangping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved- it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much-needed oxygen. Then Wangping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. “Why not sit down and eat a little?” he said. “You may found this difficult as it is your first time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you’ll be ready for some visits.” Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced abed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modern in space. Described as an enormous round plate, it spins slowly in space to imitate the pull of the earth’s gravity. Inside was an exhibition f the most up-to-date inventions of the 31st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we’re going t o examine one of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a “thoughtpad”. You place the metal band over your head, clear yo ur mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it’s sent. It’s stored on the “thoughtpad” of the receiver. It’s quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly, an unclearmessage may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called “thoughtpads” on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the “environment area”. People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I right? ( We nodded.) Well, now there’s a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as “fertilizer” for the fields and “soil” for deserts. Nothing is wasted, and everything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn’t it?I stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space station like this one. A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs,clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they’re transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do? My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 MAKING THE NEWSMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT“Unforgettable”, says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang( ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin( HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We’re delighted you’re coming to work wit h us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions?ZY: Can I get out on a story immediately?HX:(laughing) That’s admirable, but I’m afraid it would be unusual! Wait till you’re more experienced. First we’ll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful! What do I need to take with me? I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You’ll have a professional photographer wit h you to take photographs. You’ll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you’re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story? HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you admire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a g ood “nose” for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole truth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here c omes my list of dos and don’ts: don’ts miss your deadline, don’t be rude, don’t talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says. ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes?HX: This is a trick of the trade. If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorder to get the facts straight. It’s also useful if a person wants to challenge you. You have the evidence to support your story. ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A football was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the other team win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical. So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bride him. When we saw him together we guessed from the footballer’s body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an articlesuggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real “scoop”. I’m looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I’ll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTINH THE “SCOOP”“Quick,” said the editor. “Get that story ready. We need it in this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop.” Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. “Did he really do that?” asked someone from the International News Department. “Yes, I’m afraid he did,” Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading, “This will look very good on the page,” she said. “Where is a good picture of this man?” Then as the article was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang’s story. “You are really able to write a good front page article,” she said, Zhou Y ang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. “Well done,” he said to Zhou Yang. “But please show me your evidence so we’re sure we’ve got our facts straight.” “I’ll bring it to you immediately,”said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured age for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. “Wait till tonight,” hisfriend whispered. “I expect there will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!”Unit 5 FIRST AIDFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun’s harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from loosing too much water; it is where you feel cool, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burnt it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of burns.Causes of burnsyou can get burnt by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.First degree burnsThese affect only the top layer of the skin. These burns are notserious and should feel better within a day or two. Examplesinclude mild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan,stove or iron for a moment.●Second degree burnsThese affect both the top and the second layer of the skin. These burns are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburn and burns caused by hot liquids.●Three degree burnsThese affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue and organs under the skin. Examples include burns caused by electric shocks, burning clothes, or severe petrol fires. These burns cause verysevere injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once. Characteristic of burnsFirst degree burns●dry, red and mildly swollen●mildly painful●turn white when pressedSecond degree burns●rough, red and swollen●blisters●watery surface●extremely painfulThree degree burns●black and white and charred●swollen; often tissue under them can be seen●little or no pain if nerves are damaged; may be pain around edgeof injured area.First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degrees burns, keep cloths cool byputting them back in a basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burnt area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rub, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on burns as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If burns are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If burns are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree burns, it is vital to get the victim to the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECERIVES AWARD Seventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John’s quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade’s life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to t reat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade’s hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived.“I’m proud of what I did but I was just doing what I’d been taught,” John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr. Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, “There is no doubt that John’s quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade’s life. It sho ws that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference.”Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
人教版 英语 必修五 课文 电子版之欧阳与创编
Unit 1 GREAT SCIENTISTSJOHN SNOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London — so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air, a cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. From the stomach the disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people have lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 163738 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame,Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread by germs and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not toexpose people to polluted water any more. Finally “King Cholera” was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONAY THEORY Nicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun there did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went around it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only new theory could do that. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets going round it and only the moon still going around the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went around the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his th eory, saying it was against God’sidea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus’ theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built. His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.Unit 2 The United KingdomPUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King James of Scotland became King of England and Wales as well.Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency and international relations), but they will have very different institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal system as well as different football terms for competitions like the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built inthe nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to go to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national government and its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There have been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her firstdelight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. This solid stone, square tower had remained standing for one thousand years. Although the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royal palace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of BuckinghamPalace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passesthrough Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in HighgateCemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the BritishMuseum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for WindsorCastle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen?" she wondered as she fell asleep.Unit 3 LIFE IN THE FUTUREFIRST IMPRESSIONS Spacemail:liqiang299A@GreatAdventureSpaceStation.co m15/11/3008(earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad,I still cannot believe that I am taking up the prize that I won last year. I have to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from“time flag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first, however, my friend and guide, Wangping, was very understanding and gave some green tablets which helped a lot. Well- know for their expertise, his parents’ company, called “Future Tours”, transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I find?At first my surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gas had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wangping appeared. “Put on this mask,” he advised. “it’ll make you feel much better.” He handed itto me and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing downin your seat, you can move swiftly. Wangping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wangping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was swept up into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a “time lag” flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wangping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved- it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much-needed oxygen. Then Wangping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. “Why not sit down and eat a little?” he said. “You may found this difficult as it is your first time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you’ll be ready for some visits.” Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGS My first visit was to a space station considered the most modern in space. Described as an enormous round plate, itspins s lowly in space to imitate the pull of the earth’s gravity. Inside was an exhibition f the most up-to-date inventions of the 31st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we’re going t o examine one of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a “thoughtpad”. You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it’s sent. It’s stored on the “thoughtpad” of the receiver. It’s quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly, an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called “thoughtpads” on a table. They just lookedlike metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the “environment area”. People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I right? ( We nodded.) Well, now there’s a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as “fertilizer” for the fields an d “soil” for deserts. Nothing is wasted, and everything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn’t it?I stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happenedto work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space station like this one. A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture,hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they’re transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do? My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.Unit 4 MAKING THE NEWSMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT“Unforgettable”, says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang( ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin( HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We’re delighted you’re coming to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions?ZY: Can I get out on a story immediately?HX:(laughing) That’s admirable, but I’m afraid it would be unusual! Wait till you’re more experienced. First we’ll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself. ZY: Wonderful! What do I need to take with me? I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You’ll have a professional photographer wit h you to take photographs. You’ll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able to concentrate on photography later if you’re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story?HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you admire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a g ood “nose” for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole truth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story.ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here c omes my list of dos and don’ts: don’ts miss your deadline, don’t be rude, don’t talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes?HX: This is a trick of the trade. If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorder to get the facts straight. It’s also useful if a person wants to challenge you. You have the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A football was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the other team win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical. So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bride him. When we saw him together we guessed from the footballer’s body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right.ZY: Wow! That was a real “scoop”. I’m looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I’ll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTINH THE “SCOOP”“Quick,” said the editor. “Get that story ready. We need it in this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop.” Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. “Did he really do that?” asked someone from the International News Department. “Yes, I’m afraid he did,” Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading, “This will look very good on the page,” she said. “Where is a good picture of this man?” Then as the artic le was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang’s story. “You are really able to write a good front page article,” she said, Zhou Y ang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. “Well done,” he said to Zhou Yang. “But please show me your evidence so we’re sure we’ve got our facts straight.” “I’ll bring it to you immediately,”said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colourswere going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured age for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. “Wait till tonight,” his friend whispered. “I expect there will be something about this on the television news.A real scoop!”Unit 5 FIRST AIDFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun’s harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from loosing too much water; it is where you feel cool, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burnt it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of burns.Causes of burnsyou can get burnt by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending on which layers of the skin are burned.●First degree burnsThese affect only the top layer of the skin. Theseburns are not serious and should feel better within aday or two. Examples include mild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for amoment.●Second degree burnsThese affect both the top and the second layer of theskin. These burns are serious and take a few weeks toheal. Examples include severe sunburn and burnscaused by hot liquids.●Three degree burnsThese affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue and organs under the skin. Examples include burnscaused by electric shocks, burning clothes, or severepetrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once. Characteristic of burnsFirst degree burns●dry, red and mildly swollen●mildly painful●turn white when pressedSecond degree burns●rough, red and swollen●blisters●watery surface●extremely painfulThree degree burns●black and white and charred●swollen; often tissue under them can be seen●little or no pain if nerves are damaged; may be painaround edge of injured area.First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degrees burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back in a basin ofcold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burnt area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rub, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on burns as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If burns are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If burns are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree burns, it is vital to get the victim to the doctor or hospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECERIVES AWARD Seventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John’s quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade’s life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade’s hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived.“I’m proud of what I did but I was just doing what I’d been taught,” John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr. Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, “There is no doubt that John’s quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade’s life. It shows that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference.”Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.。
- 1、下载文档前请自行甄别文档内容的完整性,平台不提供额外的编辑、内容补充、找答案等附加服务。
- 2、"仅部分预览"的文档,不可在线预览部分如存在完整性等问题,可反馈申请退款(可完整预览的文档不适用该条件!)。
- 3、如文档侵犯您的权益,请联系客服反馈,我们会尽快为您处理(人工客服工作时间:9:00-18:30)。
高中英语必修五课文电子版必修5 Unit 1JOHH SHOW DEFEATS “KING CHOLERA”John Snow was a famous doctor in London - so expert, indeed, that he attended Queen Victoria as her personal physician. But he became inspired when he thought about helping ordinary people exposed to cholera. This was the deadly disease of its day. Neither its cause nor its cure was understood. So many thousands of terrified people died every time there was an outbreak. John Snow wanted to face the challenge and solve this problem. He knew that cholera would never be controlled until its cause was found.He became interested in two theories that possibly explained how cholera killed people. The first suggested that cholera multiplied in the air. A cloud of dangerous gas floated around until it found its victims. The second suggested that people absorbed this disease into their bodies with their meals. From the stomach the disease quickly attacked the body and soon the affected person died.John Snow suspected that the second theory was correct but he needed evidence. So when another outbreak hit London in 1854, he was ready to begin his enquiry. As the disease spread quickly through poor neighbourhoods, he began to gather information. In two particular streets, the cholera outbreak was so severe that more than 500 people died in ten days. He was determined to find out why.First he marked on a map the exact places where all the dead people had lived. This gave him a valuable clue about the cause of the disease. Many of the deaths were near the water pump in Broad Street (especially numbers 16, 37, 38 and 40). He also noticed that some houses (such as 20 and 21 Broad Street and 8 and 9 Cambridge Street) had had no deaths. He had not foreseen this, so he made further investigations. He discovered that these people worked in the pub at 7 Cambridge Street. They had been given free beer and so had not drunk the water from the pump. It seemed that the water was to blame.Next, John Snow looked into the source of the water for these two streets. He found that it came from the river polluted by the dirty water from London. He immediately told the astonished people in Broad Street to remove the handle from the pump so that it could not be used. Soon afterwards the disease slowed down. He had shown that cholera was spread bygerms and not in a cloud of gas.In another part of London, he found supporting evidence from two other deaths that were linked to the Broad Street outbreak. A woman, who had moved away from Broad Street, liked the water from the pump so much that she had it delivered to her house every day. Both she and her daughter died of cholera after drinking the water. With this extra evidence John Snow was able to announce with certainty that polluted water carried the virus.To prevent this from happening again, John Snow suggested that the source of all the water supplies be examined. The water companies were instructed not to expose people to polluted water any more. Finally "King Cholera" was defeated.COPERNICUS’ REVOLUTIONRRY THEORYNicolaus Copernicus was frightened and his mind was confused. Although he had tried to ignore them, all his mathematical calculations led to the same conclusion: that the earth was not the centre of the solar system. Only if you put the sun there did the movements of the other planets in the sky make sense. Yet he could not tell anyone about his theory as the powerful Christian Church would have punished him for even suggesting such an idea. They believed God had made the world and for that reason the earth was special and must be the centre of the solar system.The problem arose because astronomers had noticed that some planets in the sky seemed to stop, move backward and then go forward in a loop. Others appeared brighter at times and less bright at others. This was very strange if the earth was the centre of the solar system and all planets went round it.Copernicus had thought long and hard about these problems and tried to find an answer. He had collected observations of the stars and used all his mathematical knowledge to explain them. But only his new theory could do that. So between 1510 and 1514 he worked on it, gradually improving his theory until he felt it was complete.In 1514 he showed it privately to his friends. The changes he made to the old theory were revolutionary. He placed a fixed sun at the centre of the solar system with the planets goinground it and only the moon still going round the earth. He also suggested that the earth was spinning as it went round the sun and this explained changes in the movement of the planets and in the brightness of the stars. His friends were enthusiastic and encouraged him to publish his ideas, but Copernicus was cautious. He did not want to be attacked by the Christian Church, so he only published it as he lay dying in 1543.Certainly he was right to be careful. The Christian Church rejected his theory, saying it was against God's idea and people who supported it would be attacked. Yet Copernicus' theory is now the basis on which all our ideas of the universe are built. His theory replaced the Christian idea of gravity, which said things fell to earth because God created the earth as the centre of the universe. Copernicus showed this was obviously wrong. Now people can see that there is a direct link between his theory and the work of Isaac Newton, Albert Einstein and Stephen Hawking.必修5 Unit 2PUZZLES IN GEOGRAPHYPeople may wonder why different words are used to describe these four countries: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. You can clarify this question if you study British history.First there was England. Wales was linked to it in the thirteenth century. Now when people refer to England you find Wales included as well. Next England and Wales were joined to Scotland in the seventeenth century and the name was changed to "Great Britain". Happily this was accomplished without conflict when King James of Scotland became King of England and Wales as well. Finally the English government tried in the early twentieth century to form the United Kingdom by getting Ireland connected in the same peaceful way. However, the southern part of Ireland was unwilling and broke away to form its own government. So only Northern Ireland joined with England, Wales and Scotland to become the United Kingdom and this was shown to the world in a new flag called the Union Jack.To their credit the four countries do work together in some areas (eg, the currency andinternational relations), but they still have very different institutions. For example, Northern Ireland, England and Scotland have different educational and legal systems as well as different football teams for competitions like the World Cup!England is the largest of the four countries, and for convenience it is divided roughly into three zones. The zone nearest France is called the South of England, the middle zone is called the Midlands and the one nearest to Scotland is known as the North. You find most of the population settled in the south, but most of the industrial cities in the Midlands and the North of England. Although, nationwide, these cities are not as large as those in China, they have world-famous football teams and some of them even have two! It is a pity that the industrial cities built in the nineteenth century do not attract visitors. For historical architecture you have to go to older but smaller towns built by the Romans. There you will find out more about British history and culture.The greatest historical treasure of all is London with its museums, art collections, theatres, parks and buildings. It is the centre of national government and its administration. It has the oldest port built by the Romans in the first century AD, the oldest building begun by the Anglo-Saxons in the 1060s and the oldest castle constructed by later Norman rulers in 1066. There has been four sets of invaders of England. The first invaders, the Romans, left their towns and roads. The second, the Anglo-Saxons, left their language and their government. The third, the Vikings, influenced the vocabulary and place-names of the North of England, and the fourth, the Normans, left castles and introduced new words for food.If you look around the British countryside you will find evidence of all these invaders. You must keep your eyes open if you are going to make your trip to the United Kingdom enjoyable and worthwhile.SIGHTSEEING IN LONDONWorried about the time available, Zhang Pingyu had made a list of the sites she wanted to see in London. Her first delight was going to the Tower. It was built long ago by the Norman invaders of AD 1066. Fancy! This solid stone, square tower had remained standing for one thousand years.Although the buildings had expanded around it, it remained part of a royalpalace and prison combined. To her great surprise, Zhang Pingyu found the Queen's jewels guarded by special royal soldiers who, on special occasions, still wore the four-hundred-year-old uniform of the time of Queen Elizabeth I.There followed St Paul's Cathedral built after the terrible fire of London in 1666. It looked splendid when first built! Westminster Abbey, too, was very interesting. It contained statues in memory of dead poets and writers, such as Shakespeare. Then just as she came out of the abbey, Pingyu heard the famous sound of the clock, Big Ben, ringing out the hour. She finished the day by looking at the outside of Buckingham Palace, the Queen's house in London. Oh, she had so much to tell her friends!The second day the girl visited Greenwich and saw its old ships and famous clock that sets the world time. What interested her most was the longitude line. It is an imaginary line dividing the eastern and western halves of the world and is very useful for navigation. It passes through Greenwich, so Pingyu had a photo taken standing on either side of the line.The last day she visited Karl Marx's statue in Highgate Cemetery. It seemed strange that the man who had developed communism should have lived and died in London. Not only that, but he had worked in the famous reading room of the Library of the British Museum. Sadly the library had moved from its original place into another building and the old reading room was gone. But she was thrilled by so many wonderful treasures from different cultures displayed in the museum. When she saw many visitors enjoying looking at the beautiful old Chinese pots and other objects on show, she felt very proud of her country.The next day Pingyu was leaving London for Windsor Castle. "Perhaps I will see the Queen?" she wondered as she fell asleep.必修5 Unit 3FIRST IMPRESSIONSSpacemall: liqiang299A@ 15/11/3008 (Earthtime)Dear Mum and Dad, I still cannot believe that I am taking up this prize that I won last year. Ihave to remind myself constantly that I am really in AD 3008. Worried about the journey, I was unsettled for the first few days. As a result, I suffered from “Time lag”. This is similar to the “jet lag” you get from flying, but it seems you keep getting flashbacks from your previous time period. So I was very nervous and uncertain at first. However, my friend and guide, Wang Ping, was very understanding and gave me some green tablets which helped a lot. Well-known for their expertise, his parents' company, called "Future Tours", transported me safely into the future in a time capsule.I can still remember the moment when the space stewardess called us all to the capsule and we climbed in through a small opening. The seats were comfortable and after a calming drink, we felt sleepy and closed our eyes. The capsule began swinging gently sideways as we lay relaxed and dreaming. A few minutes later, the journey was completed and we had arrived. I was still on the earth but one thousand years in the future. What would I find?At first my new surroundings were difficult to tolerate. The air seemed thin, as though its combination of gases had little oxygen left. Hit by a lack of fresh air, my head ached. Just as I tried to make the necessary adjustment to this new situation, Wang Ping appeared. "Put on this mask," he advised. "It'll make you feel much better." He handed it to me and immediately hurried me through to a small room nearby for a rest. I felt better in no time. Soon I was back on my feet again and following him to collect a hovering carriage driven by computer. These carriages float above the ground and by bending or pressing down in your seat, you can move swiftly. Wang Ping fastened my safety belt and showed me how to use it. Soon I could fly as fast as him. However, I lost sight of Wang Ping when we reached what looked like a large market because of too many carriages flying by in all directions. He was swept up into the centre of them. Just at that moment I had a "time lag" flashback and saw the area again as it had been in the year AD 2008. I realized that I had been transported into the future of what was still my hometown! Then I caught sight of Wang Ping again and flew after him.Arriving at a strange-looking house, he showed me into a large, bright clean room. It had a green wall, a brown floor and soft lighting. Suddenly the wall moved - it was made of trees! I found later that their leaves provided the room with much-needed oxygen. Then Wang Ping flashed a switch on a computer screen, and a table and some chairs rose from under the floor as if by magic. "Why not sit down and eat a little?" he said. "You may find this difficult as it is yourfirst time travel trip. Just relax, since there is nothing planned on the timetable today. Tomorrow you'll be ready for some visits." Having said this, he spread some food on the table, and produced a bed from the floor. After he left, I had a brief meal and a hot bath. Exhausted, I slid into bed and fell fast asleep.More news later from your loving son,Li QiangI HAVE SEEN AMAZING THINGSMy first visit was to a space station considered the most modem in space. Described as an enormous round plate, it spins slowly in space to imitate the pull of the earth's gravity. Inside was an exhibition of the most up-to-date inventions of the 31 st century. A guide (G) showed us around along a moveable path.G: Good morning to all our visitors from 2008. First we're going to examine one of the latest forms of communication among our space citizens. No more typists working on a typewriter or computer! No more postage or postcodes! Messages can now be sent using a "thoughtpad". You place the metal band over your head, clear your mind, press the sending button, think your message and the next instant it's sent. It's stored on the "thoughtpad" of the receiver. It's quick, efficient and environmentally friendly. The only limitation is if the user does not think his or her message clearly, an unclear message may be sent. But we cannot blame the tools for the faults of the user, can we?During the explanation I looked at the pair of small objects called "thoughtpads" on a table. They just looked like metal ribbons. So ordinary but so powerful! While I was observing them, the path moved us on.G: And now ladies and gentlemen, we are in the "environment area". People used to collect waste in dustbins. Then the rubbish was sent to be buried or burned, am I fight? (We nodded.) Well, now there's a system where the waste is disposed of using the principles of ecology. A giant machine, always greedy for more, swallows all the waste available. The rubbish is turned into several grades of useful material, such as "fertilizer" for the fields and "soil" for deserts.Nothing is wasted, and everything, even plastic bags, is recycled. A great idea, isn't' it?I stared at the moving model of the waste machine, absorbed by its efficiency. But again we moved on.G: Our third stop shows the changes that have happened to work practices. Manufacturing no longer takes place on the earth but on space stations like this one. A group of engineers programme robots to perform tasks in space. The robots produce goods such as drugs, clothes, furniture, hovering carriages, etc. There is no waste, no pollution and no environmental damage! However, the companies have to train their representatives to live and work in space settlements. They have to monitor the robots and the production. When the goods are ready they're transported by industrial spaceship back to earth.My mind began to wander. What job would I do? My motivation increased as I thought of the wonderful world of the future.必修5 Unit 4 Making the news-ReadingMY FIRST WORK ASSIGNMENT"Unforgettable", says new journalistNever will Zhou Yang (ZY) forget his first assignment at the office of a popular English newspaper. His discussion with his new boss, Hu Xin (HX), was to strongly influence his life as a journalist.HX: Welcome. We're delighted you're coming to work with us. Your first job here will be an assistant journalist. Do you have any questions?ZY: Can I go out on a story immediately?HX: (laughing) That' s admirable, but I' m afraid it would be unusual ! Wait till you' re more experienced. First we'll put you as an assistant to an experienced journalist. Later you can cover a story and submit the article yourself.ZY: Wonderful. What do I need to take with me? I already have a notebook and camera.HX: No need for a camera. You'll have a professional photographer with you to take photographs. You'll find your colleagues very eager to assist you, so you may be able toconcentrate on photography later if you' re interested.ZY: Thank you. Not only am I interested in photography, but I took an amateur course at university to update my skills.HX: Good.ZY: What do I need to remember when I go out to cover a story?HX: You need to be curious. Only if you ask many different questions will you acquire all the information you need to know. We say a good journalist must have a good "nose" for a story. That means you must be able to assess when people are not telling the whole troth and then try to discover it. They must use research to inform themselves of the missing parts of the story. ZY: What should I keep in mind?HX: Here comes my list of dos and don'ts: don't miss your deadline, don't be rode, don't talk too much, but make sure you listen to the interviewee carefully.ZY: Why is listening so important?HX: Well, you have to listen for detailed facts. Meanwhile you have to prepare the next question depending on what the person says.ZY: But how can I listen carefully while taking notes?HX: This is a trick of the trade, If the interviewee agrees, you can use a recorder to get the facts straight. It's also useful if a person wants to challenge you. You have the evidence to support your story.ZY: I see! Have you ever had a case where someone accused your journalists of getting the wrong end of the stick?HX: Yes, but it was a long time ago. This is how the story goes. A footballer was accused of taking money for deliberately not scoring goals so as to let the other team win. We went to interview him. He denied taking money but we were sceptical. So we arranged an interview between the footballer and the man supposed to bribe him. When we saw them together we guessed from the footballer's body language that he was not telling the truth. So we wrote an article suggesting he was guilty. It was a dilemma because the footballer could have demanded damages if we were wrong. He tried to stop us publishing it but later we were proved right. ZY: Wow! That was a real "scoop". I'm looking forward to my first assignment now. Perhaps I'll get a scoop too!HX: Perhaps you will. You never know.GETTING THE "SCOOP""Quick," said the editor. "Get that story ready. We need it in this edition to be ahead of the other newspapers. This is a scoop." Zhou Yang had just come back into the office after an interview with a famous film star. "Did he really do that?" asked someone from the International News Department. "Yes, I' m afraid he did," Zhou Yang answered. He set to work.His first task was to write his story, but he had to do it carefully. Although he realized the man had been lying, Zhou Yang knew he must not accuse him directly. He would have to be accurate. Concise too! He knew how to do that. Months of training had taught him to write with no wasted words or phrases. He sat down at his computer and began to work.The first person who saw his article was a senior editor from his department. He checked the evidence, read the article and passed it on to the copy-editor. She began to edit the piece and design the main headline and smaller heading. “This will look very good on the page,” she said. "Where is a good picture of this man?" Then as the article was going to be written in English Zhou Yang also took a copy to the native speaker employed by the newspaper to polish the style. She was also very happy with Zhou Yang's story. "You are really able to write a good front page article," she said. Zhou Yang smiled with happiness. Last of all, the chief editor read it and approved it. "Well done," he said to Zhou Yang. "But please show me your evidence so we're sure we've got our facts straight.” “I’ll bri ng it to you immediately," said Zhou Yang excitedly.The news desk editor took the story and began to work on all the stories and photos until all the pages were set. All the information was then ready to be processed into film negatives. This was the first stage of the printing process. They needed four negatives, as several colours were going to be used on the story. Each of the main colours had one negative sheet and when they were combined they made a coloured page for the newspaper. After one last check the page was ready to be printed. Zhou Yang waited excitedly for the first copies to be ready. "Wait 611 tonight," his friend whispered. "I expect there will be something about this on the television news. A real scoop!"必修5 Unit 5 First aid-ReadingFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun's harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from losing too much water; it is where you feel cold, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burned it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of bums.Causes of burnsYou can get burned by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to high heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending onwhich layers of the skin are burned.◎First degree burns These affect only the top layer of the skin. These burns are not serious and should feel better within a day or two. Examples include mild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for a mordent.◎Second degree burns These affect both the top and the second layer of the skin. These bums are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburn and bums caused by hot liquids.◎Third degree burns These affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue and organs under the skin. Examples include burns caused by electric shocks, burning clothes, or severe petrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once. Characteristics of burnsFirst degree burns◎dry, red and mildly swollen◎mildly painful◎turn white when pressedSecond degree burns◎rough, red and swollen◎blisters◎watery surface◎extremely painfulThird degree burns◎black and white and charred◎swollen; often tissue under them can be seen◎little or no pain if nerves are damaged; may be pain around edge of injured area.First aid treatment1 Remove clothing using scissors if necessary unless it is stuck to the burn. Take off other clothing and jewellery near the burn.2 Cool burns immediately with cool but not icy water. It is best to place burns under gently running water for about 10 minutes. (The cool water stops the burning process, prevents the pain becoming unbearable and reduces swelling.) Do not put cold water on third degree burns.3 For first degree burns, place cool, clean, wet cloths on them until the pain is not so bad. For second degree burns, keep cloths cool by putting them back in a basin of cold water, squeezing them out and placing them on the burned area over and over again for about an hour until the pain is not so bad.4 Dry the burned area gently. Do not rob, as this may break any blisters and the wound may get infected.5 Cover the burned area with a dry, clean bandage that will not stick to the skin. Hold the bandage in place with tape. Never put butter, oil or ointment on bums as they keep the heat in the wounds and may cause infection.6 If bums are on arms or legs, keep them higher than the heart, if possible. If bums are on the face, the victim should sit up.7 If the injuries are second or third degree bums, it is vital to get the victim to the doctor orhospital at once.HEROIC TEENAGER RECEIVES AWARDSeventeen-year-old teenager, John Janson, was honoured at the Lifesaver Awards last night in Rivertown for giving lifesaving first aid on his neighbour after a shocking knife attack.John was presented with his award at a ceremony which recognized the bravery of ten people who had saved the life of another.John was studying in his room when he heard screaming. When he and his father rushed outside, a man ran from the scene. They discovered that Anne Slade, mother of three, had been stabbed repeatedly with a knife. She was lying in her front garden bleeding very heavily. Her hands had almost been cut off.It was John's quick action and knowledge of first aid that saved Ms Slade's life. He immediately asked a number of nearby people for bandages, but when nobody could put their hands on any, his father got some tea towels and tape from their house. John used these to treat the most severe injuries to Ms Slade's hands. He slowed the bleeding by applying pressure to the wounds until the police and ambulance arrived."I'm proud of what I did but I was just doing what I'd been taught," John said.John had taken part in the Young Lifesaver Scheme at his high school. When congratulating John, Mr Alan Southerton, Director of the Young Lifesaver Scheme said, "There is no doubt that John's quick thinking and the first aid skills he learned at school saved Ms Slade's life. It shows that a knowledge of first aid can make a real difference."Before receiving their awards last night, John and the nine other Life Savers attended a special reception yesterday hosted by the Prime Minister.必修5 Unit 5 First aid-ReadingFIRST AID FOR BURNSThe skin is an essential part of your body and its largest organ. You have three layers of skin which act as a barrier against disease, poisons and the sun's harmful rays. The functions of your skin are also very complex: it keeps you warm or cool; it prevents your body from losing too much water; it is where you feel cold, heat or pain and it gives you your sense of touch. So as you can imagine, if your skin gets burned it can be very serious. First aid is a very important first step in the treatment of bums.Causes of burnsYou can get burned by a variety of things: hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation (by being close to high heat or fire, etc), the sun, electricity or chemicals.Types of burnsThere are three types of burns. Burns are called first, second or third degree burns, depending onwhich layers of the skin are burned.◎First degree burns These affect only the top layer of the skin. These burns are not serious and should feel better within a day or two. Examples include mild sunburn and burns caused by touching a hot pan, stove or iron for a mordent.◎Second degree burns These affect both the top and the second layer of the skin. These bums are serious and take a few weeks to heal. Examples include severe sunburn and bums caused by hot liquids.◎Third degree burns These affect all three layers of the skin and any tissue and organs under the skin. Examples include burns caused by electric shocks, burning clothes, or severe petrol fires. These burns cause very severe injuries and the victim must go to hospital at once. Characteristics of burnsFirst degree burns◎dry, red and mildly swollen◎mildly painful◎turn white when pressedSecond degree burns◎rough, red and swollen◎blisters。